|
Monday July 13, 2026
|
|
5:30 AM - 7:30 AM
|
Adult pickup soccer
|
|
|
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday July 14, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 8:30 PM
|
Free Concerts - Waterbury Community Band
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday July 15, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday July 16, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:30 PM - 6:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 2-4
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Waterbury Rotary Concerts in the Park
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 5-8
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
Friday July 17, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 7/6 - 7/17 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Saturday July 18, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 3/4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 3:00 PM
|
2 year old birthday party
|
|
|
|
|
Monday July 20, 2026
|
|
5:30 AM - 7:30 AM
|
Adult pickup soccer
|
|
|
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday July 21, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 8:30 PM
|
Free Concerts - Waterbury Community Band
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday July 22, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday July 23, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:30 PM - 6:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 2-4
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Waterbury Rotary Concerts in the Park
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 5-8
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
Friday July 24, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Saturday July 25, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 3/4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Monday July 27, 2026
|
|
5:30 AM - 7:30 AM
|
Adult pickup soccer
|
|
|
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday July 28, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday July 29, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 5:50 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 10 and under AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 7:15 PM
|
Waterbury Rapids Swim Team - 11 and UP AGE GROUP
Waterbury Rapids Information Our mission is to create a fun, safe and caring environment for swimmers to improve their swimming technique, build friendships, set goals to better their own time records, persevere to qualify for State Championships, break records & compete against the clock and peers. AGE GROUPS 10 and under $140 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 5pm - 5:50pm11 and up $175 (3 practices a week Mon, Tues, Wed) 6pm - 7:15pm(flexible swim group timing depending on circumstances - see coach to discuss)FAMILY DISCOUNTS10 dollar discount per swimmer when a family registers 2 or more swimmers MEETSThursday June 25th, 2026Thursday July 2nd 2026Thursday July 9th, 2026,Thursday July 16th, 2026Thursday July 23rd, 2026 FAMILY INVOLVEMENTOur team is run and organized by family volunteers. Expectations Include:Pre-Season Required Informational Meeting (on Google Meet Tuesday June 16th 7-7:45)Team planning and organizing.Manage the website.Organize and run meets: set up, concessions, timing, swimmer event preparation (bullpen), and clean up.Officials and Starter for the meets.Contact information is shared with Waterbury Rapids Swim Team only for swim team purposes. Contact information will not be shared with anyone else.
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday July 30, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:30 PM - 6:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 2-4
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Waterbury Rotary Concerts in the Park
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 5-8
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
Friday July 31, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 7/20 - 7/31 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Saturday August 1, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 10:00 PM
|
Hope Davey Pavilion: Family Reunion
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 3/4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
3 Year old Birthday Party
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Monday August 3, 2026
|
|
5:30 AM - 7:30 AM
|
Adult pickup soccer
|
|
|
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday August 4, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday August 5, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday August 6, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:30 PM - 6:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 2-4
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Waterbury Rotary Concerts in the Park
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 7:30 PM
|
Tennis the Parks offered by USTA New England - Tennis Lesson Grades 5-8
Youth Program DescriptionTennis in the Parks - The tennis program where kids play while they learn!Led by an approved USTA Net Generation tennis coach, the program will focus on developing the skills to serve, rally, and play - so it’s perfect for beginners and first-time players. This program uses modified tennis balls, age-appropriate rackets, court sizes, and the latest fun and engaging activities that help players successfully learn and play the game quicker! All players in their first session receive and keep a new tennis racket! Program Dates/TimesSummerGrades 2-4 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 5:30pm - 6:30pmGrades 5-8 Thursdays 7/9 - 8/13 from 6:30pm - 7:30pm Rain Date 8/20CostYouth $75 Minimum 7 players per program and a maximum of 10 (or 14 total across the age groups)Location: 27 Butler St, Waterbury VT, 05676
|
|
|
|
|
Friday August 7, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Saturday August 8, 2026
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 3/4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 9:30 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
9:40 AM - 10:10 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
10:20 AM - 10:50 AM
|
Saturday Swim Lessons - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run every Saturday morning for the duration of the pool season. Please note: there will be no lessons on Saturday, July 4The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 3:00 PM
|
Hope Davey Pavilion: Perry Family Reunion
|
|
|
|
|
Monday August 10, 2026
|
|
5:30 AM - 7:30 AM
|
Adult pickup soccer
|
|
|
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday August 11, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
6:30 PM - 8:30 PM
|
Free Concerts - Waterbury Community Band
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday August 12, 2026
|
|
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Day Camp - 2026 - Summer Day Camp: Rising Stars
2026 Summer Camp Registration has closed. This information remains posted for reference.2026 Summer Day Camp information and registration details.2026 Summer Day Camp registration will only be open on waterburyrec.com only (there will be no in-person registration).Make sure to create an account and/or log-in to your account prior to registration to ensure correct information & smooth registration.CHILD'S GRADE FOR SUMMER '26 IS THE GRADE THEY ARE GOING INTO IN THE FALL.REGISTRATION DETAILS
February 13th at 9am - Registration for Residents for all session slots
February 20th at 9am - All registration for all session slots
Friday, March 20 - Summer Day Camp prices have increased 10% for all available slots
CAMPS
Camps are organized by theme with the exception of our youngest camp, and meet at different locations (to be shared once confirmed).
Rising Stars* - Our youngest campers will explore, create, and play lots of games outdoors, along with plenty of down time to make crafts, create tasty snacks, hear stories, and swim at the pool.
Creative Kids Camp - An artistic camp for creative minds! From painting to drama games, baking to nature crafts and friendship bracelets, we will perform, craft, sing, paint and create all summer long.
Adventure & Exploration Camp - Adventure & Exploration Camp will offer time to explore our parks, hike some local trails, play high energy games, follow treasure maps, hike, make nature crafts, and learn to work together as a team.
Action & Energy Camp - In this sport-intensive camp, we will test our skills in countless games and athletic endeavors, along with team building.
LOGISTICS
DATES: June 29th – August 14th.There is no camp on Friday, July 3 and Friday, July 31. Both of these weeks have been prorated in the weekly price. TIMES: 8:00 am – 5:00 pmLOCATIONS:
Recreation Building, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Waterbury Public Pool, Anderson Park, 27 Butler St., Waterbury, VT
Brookside Primary School, 47 Stowe St., Waterbury, VT
Camp regularly visits town parks and walks between locations.
PRICINGPrices Increase by 10% on March 20, 2026
7-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $1,275/$1,755
1-WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST: $310/$370
PRORATED WEEK RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT COST**: $248/$296
PAYMENT***
If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
At Registration: A non-refundable registration fee of $50 is required to secure your spot.
May 1st: Half (50%) of the remaining invoice balance is due by 4pm.
June 1st: Remaining balance (payment in full) is due by 4pm.
If these payment deadlines are not met, the seat will be forfeited and available to the next individual on the wait-list.
POLICIES
Multiple Registrations: You may not sign up the same child for week-only slots and the full 7-week block- doing so may result in the cancellation of all registrations.
Payment Methods: If you choose, you can pay for camp after the online registration fee by cash or check due to "Waterbury Recreation" and mail or drop off the payment at 28 N Main Street, Suite 1, Waterbury VT 05676.
Wait-list: If camp is full by the time you register, use the waitlist registration below or log in and click here.
Cancellation Policy: Cancellations with less than a week's notice are not refunded. Cancellations with 7-30 days' notification receive 75% refund. Cancellations with more than 30 days notice receive a full refund, minus the non-refundable $50 registration fee.
*Rising Stars Campers must have either completed kindergarten by the end of the 2025-2026 school year or be 6 years old by September 1, 2026 to be able to be served by Waterbury Recreation Summer Camp. Even if you are able to register, if you do not meet these grade and age limits, we cannot enroll you in camp.
**Discounts for Prorated Weeks will be applied at checkout for the 4 day weeks of July 3rd and July 31st.
***Payment Plans & Scholarships: If you are unable to pay in full for camp by the deadlines listed, contact elinskey@waterburyvt.com to set up a payment plan. Waterbury Rec will once again offer scholarships covering up to 90% of camp tuition. Completed applications must be received by April 1st to be considered. Apply Here Please reach out with any questions!
For further information and detailed Recreation policies, see our Summer Camp Family Handbook 2026.
GENERAL DAILY SCHEDULE (subject to change based on weather and special events such as Field Trips):General Daily Camp Schedule 8-9am Drop off 9-11:00am Activity time with camp groups. Some camp groups will continue with activity time till 11:30am, depending on the swim lesson schedule that day 11:00am Walk to swim lessons if it is your campers swim lesson day or lunch time for Rising Stars (youngest camp group) 11:30am Swim lessons if it your campers swim lesson day (Adventure & Exploration Mondays)(Rising Stars Tuesday)(Action & Energy Wednesdays)(Creative Kids Thursdays)(make up day Friday) or walk to lunch location for other camp groups. Please have your camper arrive to camp in their swim suit on the day of their lessons. 1pm Lunch time for older camp groups or quiet play time for youngest campers 1-4pm Pool, park and games 4-5pm pick up time Please plan to arrive for pick up with enough time to greet your camper and communicate sign out with staff by 5pm. The camp day ends for both campers and staff at 5pm. Please note our check-in and check out policies as found in our handbook.
If you have questions about registration, please reach out to Erika Linskey, Recreation Director at (802)-244-1010/ elinskey@waterburyvt.com and Sam Grandfield, Assistant Director at (802)-244-7414/ sgrandfield@waterburyvt.com . We are looking forward to a fun-packed and exciting summer at Waterbury Rec!
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 2:00 PM
|
Umiak Outfitters River Shuttle
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 3
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
4:30 PM - 5:00 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Parent & Child Aquatics
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:00 PM - 10:00 PM
|
Women's Softball Games and Practices
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 1
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 5/6
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:10 PM - 5:40 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Preschool Aquatics (PreK)
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 2
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|
|
5:50 PM - 6:20 PM
|
Summer Swim Lessons Session 4 8/3 - 8/14 - Learn to Swim Level 4
Welcome to summer swim lessons at the Waterbury Pool!These lessons run in two weeks sessions, with lessons happening daily Monday-Friday. The first day is always an evaluation day to make sure that everyone is in the swim level that is the best fit for them. New this year: American Red Cross Learn to Swim Curriculum. In the descriptions below you will find a comparison to our previous lesson curriculum for reference. Swim lessons are overseen by pool director Heather Lessor and assistant director KC Shogren. They each have many years of experience teaching children of all ages. Please read the information below to determine the correct level for your child. Parent & Child - The purpose of parent & child swimming lessons is to familiarize children between the ages of 6 months and 3 years with the water and teach swimming readiness skills, provide safety information to parents and teach techniques to help parents orient their child to water. (Similar to Star Babies)PreK - The purpose of preschool aquatics to help familiarize children aged 4-5 with the aquatic environment and support them in developing positive attitudes and safe practices in and around the water, as well as introduce rudimentary aquatic skills. (Similar to PreK White/Red)Learn to Swim Level 1 - The objectives for this level are introduce children aged 6 + to the aquatic environment and help them develop positive attitudes and safe practices around water while teaching basic swimming skills. These skills include entering and exiting the water independently, floating and kicking on front and back, and submerging. (Similar to Youth Red) Learn to Swim Level 2 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1. These skills include floating/treading and using combined arm and leg action on front and back independently. (Similar to Youth Yellow)Learn to Swim Level 3 - The objectives for this level are to build on the swimming and water safety skills introduced in level 1 and 2 to water competency in a pool environment. These skills include treading for one minute, changing direction in the water, and swimming 25+ yard with a recognizable stroke. (Similar to Youth Blue)Learn to Swim Level 4 - The objectives for this level are to improve proficiency in basic swimming strokes including front crawl, breaststroke, and elementary backstroke. (Similar to Youth Green)Learn to Swim Level 5 & 6 - The objectives for these levels include refining skills in all six swimming strokes and building endurance over longer distances. (Similar to Stroke School)
|
|
|
|